Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.Introduction In this tutorial. 1 . you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. Finally.

2 .

electrical panels. Add more detailed modelling elements. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. and plumbing engineering workflows. fixtures. electrical. such as duct. such as mechanical equipment.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. and piping. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. 3 . Add basic MEP elements. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. and plumbing fixtures. Germany. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson.

Create schedules. When you install the training files as instructed. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. templates. On the Contents tab. your Training folder may be in a different location. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. However. when you add ductwork. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. When you open a training file. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. NOTE Depending on your installation. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. you can choose to save your work. Contact your CAD manager for more information. Create detail views. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. Metric: files for users working with metric units. and tags. annotations. such as templates and families. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. You do not design entire systems. For example. views. and sheets to document the project. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. you learn where the training files are located. Metric file names have an _m suffix. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. In this exercise. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. So. to provide a richer and more finished design. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . however. For example. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. as well as how to open and save them. After completing each exercise. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system.

NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close.rvt) is selected. the Open dialog displays. 4 Click the training file name. and click Save. and click the Training Files icon. if you open settings. verify that Project Files (*. scroll down. and you can open any supported file type. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. a list of file types displays. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 If you have made changes. For example. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. 3 In the right pane. For Files of type.rvt. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. you are prompted to save the changes. For File name. click ➤ Save As. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. enter the new file name. double-click Imperial or Metric. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. select the folder in which to save the new file. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. You may close the file with or without saving changes. and click Open.rvt and make changes. Accessing Training Files | 5 .

6 .

What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. You learn the terminology. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. In the Revit MEP model. In this case.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. drawing sheets. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. and plans. schedules. drawings. sections. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. ■ ■ 7 . the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. In this case. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. As you work in drawing and schedule views. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and schedules required for a building project. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. the operation of the software is parametric. 2D and 3D view. the floor or roof remains connected. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. quantities. and phases when you need it. the door retains this relationship to the partition. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. every drawing sheet. If the length of the elevation is changed. the hierarchy of elements. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. If you move the partition. the parameter is one of association or connection. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. hence. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. scope.

The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. tags. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. and electrical panels. ducts. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. tags. Datum elements help to define project context. They help to describe or document the design. For example. and electrical panels. ducts. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. For example. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. boilers. and reference planes are datum elements. They display in relevant views of the design. When you change something. For example. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. Examples include detail lines. grids. sinks. For example. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. dimensions. and 2D detail components. walls and ceilings are hosts. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. dimensions. filled regions. levels. boilers. For example. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example. and keynotes are annotation elements. sprinklers. sinks. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. sprinklers. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed.

programming is not required. and ceilings. Often. In other cases. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. you do nothing to establish these relationships. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. views of the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. or bottom of foundation. from geometry to construction data. North . This information includes components used to design the model. and so forth). If you can draw.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. For example. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. The project file contains all information for the building design. elevation views.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. and drawings of the design. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. top of wall. you can explicitly control them. families. section views. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. In Revit MEP. and types. Most often. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. such as roofs. floors. you must be in a section or elevation view. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Project: In Revit MEP. By using a single project file. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. However. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. for example. first floor. To place levels. schedules. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls.

and wires. showing. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. However. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. such as a A0 title block. Type: Each family can have several types. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. pipes. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. Unlike system and standard component families. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. For example. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). System families include ducts. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. or layer the views to see only the one on top. You can also display several project views at one time. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. A type can also be a style. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. Then experiment with them.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. hiding. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. With a few clicks. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. and similar graphical representation. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. For example. identical use. System families can be transferred between projects. For example. each in-place family contains only a single type. A type can be a specific size of a family.

Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. To return the panel to the ribbon. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon.

tools used for running analysis on the current design. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. data and systems. architect-specific tools. and settings. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. then select what you want to modify. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images.. and CAD files. select the tool first. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. project and system parameters. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. When working on the Modify tab. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. tools used for editing existing elements. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. and for switching views.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain..

This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. By default. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. provides requested information. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. closes the application menu (double-click). To keep a panel expanded. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. displays frequently used tools.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. when adding duct. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. For example. provides access to common tools.

(Save As) export the current drawing. click. select a file to open.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to.. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. (Open) save the current drawing. select a template and create a new drawing.. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (Export) On the application menu.. such as Export and Publish.

Camera.. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. family. (Publish) print the current drawing. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session... (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. (Licensing) close the file. annotation. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . to. To enable or disable a tool item.. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. but is not enabled by default. or template file. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. and Walkthrough. (Print) access product and license information. saves a current project. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. click. provides views including Default 3D. or template file. family. publish the current project. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.On the application menu. annotation.

Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option.To undo or redo a series of operations. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. To show the Status Bar again. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. repeat the command. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. check the Status Bar. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Modify. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. To hide the Status Bar. In addition. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . When you are highlighting an element or component. Starting with the most recent command. or the Family Editor. However. Clipboard. Clear the Status Bar check mark. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. when you switch to another editing mode. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. When you are using a command. Group. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. workshared components. This displays the command history in a list. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. displaying the same information.

select one or more elements of the same category. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. for example. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. To change existing elements to a different type. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . When you place an element in a drawing. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Modify). do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Place a Wall. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add.To cancel or exit the current command. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element.

18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 1 Click ➤ Open. For example. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. In the following steps. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. There are several ways to access zoom options. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. click Training Files. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. After you are familiar with these tasks.rvt. Zoom the view In the tutorials.

NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. NOTE As you zoom in and out. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. Modifying the View | 19 . SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. When you release the mouse button. If you do not have a wheel mouse.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. on the Navigation bar. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. this is referred to as a crossing selection. click . In the drawing area. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. To modify or add snap increments. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. 9 To display SteeringWheels. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. 6 Click in the drawing area. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. the view zooms in on the selected area.

moving the wheel to the desired location. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. Click and drag to orbit the design. As you move the mouse. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. To define settings for SteeringWheels. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 14 To exit the wheel. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For more information about SteeringWheels. press ESC. and then using the Zoom tool again. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. and click tin the Options dialog. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. ➤ Options.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. click the SteeringWheels tab.

Small blue dots. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . referred to as shape handles. After you are familiar with these tasks. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area.Design. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. bottoms. as shown. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Click and drag the bottom control. These are the drag controls.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. Similar controls. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. display along the ends. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. called drag controls.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. and select the duct. and open Level 2 . Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. 2 Enter ZR. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial.

or press CTRL+Z. select the first item in the list. Move. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. click the Undo command. 6 On the Undo menu. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. on the Standard toolbar. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . In this example. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action.

In this case. you want to move the duct. such as Move and Copy. click to specify the starting position. The duct is moved to the new position. and click again to specify the ending position. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . as shown. 11 With the duct already selected.Some commands. and drag it to the left as shown. for example. 10 Move the cursor to the right. After selecting the element to move.

15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. 14 Enter VG. such as the Modify Ducts command. Press ESC twice. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Click OK.End a command Some commands. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. Select Mechanical . For example. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct.Return.Supply. 13 To end a command. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

under Template file. In that case. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). You also learn how to use collaboration tools. and geometry from the starting template. 2 In the New Project dialog. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. Finally. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. settings. such as the default project units and settings. system families. click Browse. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. click Training files. under Create new. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. 6 Click OK. link files. and open North. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. and open Metric ➤ Templates. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. New projects inherit all the families. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. create and manage views. 7 In the Project Browser. use copy/monitor. 5 In the New Project dialog. and click Open. such as ducts and pipes.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. select Project. you learn how to start a project from a template. 27 . The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and modify system settings. You can choose from several templates.rte template. the default building levels and standard views. You can either select a template from the template library. such as coordination review and interference checking. and loadable families.

In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. Click Cancel. click Browse. NH. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. create another new project using the Construction template. for City. If you want to use a template other than the default. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 10 Using the same method. In the Choose Template dialog. select Project template. Click OK twice. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information.rte template and click Open. you can select it now. click Edit. select Level 1. navigate to Metric Templates. For Location. For example. Click OK. click (Browse). To maintain office standards and reduce rework. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. under Energy Analysis. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. ■ For Building Construction. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. for Energy Data. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. ■ ■ Under Create new.8 In the drawing area. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . review the construction materials listed. When you select the material. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. (Browse). select Manchester. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. select School or University.

290. for 90. After standard settings have been established for an organization. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.00 mm. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. click Sizes. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. select Identity Data. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. click Rectangular. click Round. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. and 310. and 140. 26 In the right pane. For Categories. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 140. 110. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts.00 mm.00 mm. power distribution systems. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 33 Click OK. Click OK twice. and fire protection systems. 22 In the right pane. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.000 mm. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. click Wiring. 110. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 24 In the right pane.00 mm. plumbing.00 mm. 260. select Views. 23 In the left pane. under Duct Settings.00 mm. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. wiring.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under.00 mm. under Duct Settings. and demand factors for electrical systems. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 25 In the left pane. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family.00 mm. piping. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. for 20.rfa and click Open. under Pipe Settings.00 mm. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. for 90. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. Holding CTRL. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 27 Click OK.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark.

you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. select Project. To enable this coordination. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. click Browse. select Sub-Discipline. In addition. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. For Then by. select Family and Type. under Template file. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. 5 Click OK. For Sort by. families. under Create new. Select Ascending Click OK twice. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. and groups that are contained in a project. For Then by. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. Linking Projects In this exercise. 2 In the New Project dialog. Click Open. From the Positioning list. select Auto . and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. click Training. select View Name. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project.rvt. 38 Close the file. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. 4 In the New Project dialog. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. sheets.Origin to Origin. Notice that the file is saved as a template. select Associated Level.

Linking Projects | 31 . 8 If necessary. under Constraints.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. select Room Bounding. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 12 Click OK. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. select the linked architectural model. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model.Mech.

click Plan View types. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. click the level line for 03. 17 On the Options Bar.Floor. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 19 On the left side of the view. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof.

and the level 4. 27 In the drawing area. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. click Custom. click By Host View. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. If you modify a monitored element. warnings notify you of any violations. level 3. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. select Custom. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. highlight the linked model. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. Linking Projects | 33 . of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. appears above the copied elements. After copying. for the link file. and click to select the linked model. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. and that the copied elements are monitored. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. a warning message displays. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. indicating that a relationship is established. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. 29 In the drawing area. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. 34 On the Basics tab. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool.

Under Visibility. click Custom. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. 3 In the View templates dialog. Planting. 7 Click OK twice. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. enter Mechanical View and click OK. 5 On the Basics tab. Click OK. 2 In the New View Template dialog.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. Site. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. Select Show categories from all disciplines. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. deselect Parking. click Edit. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. Click OK.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. click Custom. Roads. for the link file. deselect Levels. select Custom. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . under View Properties. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. for Name. and Topography. Under Visibility. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. 36 Click OK.

Notice that the drawing area is black. Modifying System Settings | 35 . 2 In the Options dialog.rte. 8 Click ➤ Options. select Mechanical and click OK. click Browse. journal cleanup options. and click OK. 7 Click OK. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. and your username when using worksharing. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. select Invert background color. 3 Under Colors. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. under Template file. These settings control the graphics. click Training Files. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. notification preferences. under View Templates. selection default options.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. 5 In the New Project dialog. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. 9 In the Options dialog. click the Graphics tab. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. they are not saved to project files or template files. click the Graphics tab. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment.

select yellow. and click OK. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. family template files. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. you specify default file locations. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . However. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 2 In the Options dialog. 11 In the Color dialog. select One hour. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. the elements causing the error display using this color. 21 Close the file without saving it. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 13 Under Notifications. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. For Tooltip assistance. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. and family libraries. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall. including your default project template.10 Under Colors. When an error occurs. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. 14 Click OK. 12 Click the General tab. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. select None. click the value for Selection color. click the File Locations tab. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval.

7 In the Options dialog. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. note the list of library names. under Default path for family template files. click Browse. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive.3 Under Default template file. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. Load. Save. 10 In the Places dialog. and Import dialogs. click Browse. you can start a new project with that template. 5 Under Default path for user files. However. saving. click Places. When you are opening. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. 4 Click Cancel. centralized. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. Click and click Browse to select a template. ➤ New ➤ Project. 8 Click Cancel. TIP To view a template. such as in a large. click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. or loading a Revit MEP file. and click Open. and you can create new libraries. select the folder to save your files to by default. Specifying File Locations | 37 . 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. In the following illustration. You can modify the existing library names and path.

and change the name to My Library. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and click OK twice. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. click the My Library icon. and Import dialogs. and select it as the library path. 15 Under Library Name. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. ➤ Open. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Load. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. click My Library. templates. click (Add Value). 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . or families. Save. and click Open.11 In the Places dialog. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. and click (Browse).

23 Click 24 Click OK. This path is determined during installation. 21 On the File Locations tab.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. specify the new location here. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 9 In the text editor. (Remove Value) to delete the library. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. click Edit. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 19 Click Cancel. If you want to relocate this path. 11 In the Options dialog. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 14 Click in the drawing area. custom color files. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 5 In the text editor. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 27 Click OK. 20 Click ➤ Options. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. select Ignore words in uppercase. click the Spelling tab. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 22 Select My Library. view the current path. 3 Under Settings. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. If you work in a large office. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. such as bump maps. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. and decal image files. 12 Create a new project using the default template. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click Edit. click Places. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 2 In the Options dialog. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. click OK.

In this exercise. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. under Template file. 4 In the New Project dialog. 21 Under Personal dictionary.. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . delete sheetmtl-CU. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click OK. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 18 Click ➤ Options. click Browse. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. As you zoom in and out within a view. 22 In the text editor. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You can turn snap settings on and off. 23 In the text editor. click OK. click Restore Defaults. you modify snap increments. click the Spelling tab. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 6 In the Snaps dialog.17 In the Spelling dialog. and enter 500 .rte. 25 Close the file without saving it. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. work with snapping turned off. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 2 In the New Project dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. under Dimension Snaps. click Close. click Training Files. click Edit. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. you modify snap settings. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 20 Under Settings. 19 In the Options dialog. 24 In the Options dialog. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . click File menu ➤ Save.

Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . For example. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. 8 In the Snaps dialog. While sketching. deselect Chain. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. snapping reverts to the system default settings. If it does not. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. zoom out until it does so. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. TIP To zoom while sketching. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. This is the increment that you added previously. enter SM. 10 On the Options Bar. and move the cursor to the right. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. click OK. If you do not have a wheel button.7 Under Object Snaps. use the wheel button on your mouse. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. such as ZO to zoom out. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. After you click to place the object at the midpoint.

14 Click to set the wall endpoint. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. and delete the value 500 . Notice that snapping is once again active. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. the midpoint. and the wall edges. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 26 Close the file. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. with or without saving it. it will snap to the endpoints. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. If you move the cursor along the wall. the command is only active for one click of the mouse.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. and specify the wall endpoint. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Do not set the wall end point.. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 22 Move the cursor downward. 19 Enter SM. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 25 Click OK. and move the cursor to the right. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. 43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

44 .

and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you first configure the linked architectural model. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. After finishing each exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. By following the recommended workflow. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. If the tutorial training files are not present. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. go to http://www. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. you first plan the system. you can choose to save your work. As you create the mechanical system.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you design a mechanical system for an office building. However. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. After applying a color scheme to the zones. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. duct system and a hydronic piping system. At the end of the tutorial.autodesk. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. methodology. you will understand the process. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. water source heat pump (WSHP). In this exercise. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. and then you create a plenum level. 45 . In this lesson. This system consists of a cooling tower.

You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click Training Files. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. NOTE When working with a linked file. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. indicating that it’s the active view.Space Plan is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 6 In the Project Browser. ceilings. Next. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . These components are defined in the architectural training file. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. under Constraints. select Room Bounding. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. click to select it. and double-click West . 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. and after the linked model highlights. not in the MEP training file.rvt. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. roof. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. In this section. you add a level for plenums.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model.MEP. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model.

Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. The new level is placed. and click Properties. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). 9 On the Draw panel. and in the Plan View Types dialog. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. For Offset. and click OK. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. enter 2600mm. right-click Level 2 Plenum. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Click Plan View Types. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. Preparing Spaces | 47 . and enter Level 2 Plenum. 16 Press Esc. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line).7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level.

In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. you place spaces in areas of the building model. For Cut plane. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. For View Classification. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Under Extents. and then place spaces in various types of areas. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. Under Identity Data. In this exercise. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. right-click Level 2 Plenum. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. ■ Click OK twice. NOTE After finishing each exercise. select Plenum Plan. select Design. In the next exercise. for View Range. enter an Offset of 300mm. and click Apply Default View Template. However.Plenum. enter 0. for Top. select MEP . verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. and for Offset. click Edit. for View Scale. In this exercise. For Sub-Discipline. Under View Depth.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. you can choose to save your work. 20 In the Project Browser. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . for Level. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. for Default View Template. select Level Above (Level 3). 21 Close the file with or without saving it.

select New. indicating that it’s the active view. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. and ceilings). For Space. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. select Horizontal. click Training Files.rvt. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. This specifies the vertical extent of the space.Space Plan is highlighted. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. Placing Spaces | 49 . walls. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. For Upper Limit. For Offset. enter 0. select Level 2 Plenum. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For (Tag Location).

9 Select the space. For Name. enter 219. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 14 In the drawing area.7 Click to place the space. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). for Number. ensuring coordination between the files.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . enter Library. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. Click OK. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data.

18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 0.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. For Offset. 21 Using the method learned previously. For Upper Limit. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and then click Modify. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. Placing Spaces | 51 . Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. select Level 3. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time.

This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you place a space in a large corridor area. under Energy Analysis. and then split the space using a space separation line. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 Click OK. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes.22 In the Instance Properties dialog.

and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. for Upper Limit. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. indicating that it’s the active view.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and then press Esc. 5 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. enter 0.Space Plan is highlighted.rvt. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . select Level 3. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and for Offset.

and scroll to the newly placed space. and select Corridor. 10 Click in the number column. In the schedule. 9 In the schedule. click in the name column. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number.7 In the Project Browser. which was numbered 219Q. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and change the space number to 216A.

15 Press Esc twice. 11 Close the schedule view. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. as shown. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221.

56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. you place a space in a chase.16 Using the method learned previously. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. place a space in the lower area of the split space.

Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). click (Flip Section) to reorient the section.Space Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. If necessary. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.

for Upper Limit. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. select Interior and Reference. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and then click OK. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. In the plan view. and click Element Properties. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. select Level 3. enter 0. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. select Roof Level. right-click. select the space. For Offset. 6 Enter VG. for Upper Limit. 12 Click in the section view. but that the space does not fill the entire chase.4 Press Esc. 10 In the plan view. expand Spaces. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. On the Options Bar. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click in the chase area to place the space.

select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. for Name. floors. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations.■ For Limit Offset. 15 Press Esc. and maximize the view. enter 225PC.Space Plan. enter Chase. For Number. Under Identity Data. ceilings. All spaces in the view are tagged. 17 Type ZF. Bounding elements (such as walls. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . under Loaded Tags. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. and click OK. enter 1200. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof.

it is automatically added to the Default zone. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Zoning is highlighted. In the next exercises. 1 In the Project Browser. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. and you placed spaces for various types of areas.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. After a space is placed in an area. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. click Training Files. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. In this exercise. To display space reference lines. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. which removes the space from the Default zone. under Spaces. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Reference.20 Close the file with or without saving it. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. click View ➤ Zones.

you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. click Reference. you assign spaces to zones in the building. the Edit Zone tab displays. you assign spaces to a zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Energy Analysis.rvt. The Zone tool is active. under Spaces. double-click 121 Cafeteria. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . select Occupiable. click Training Files. As you do this. and click OK. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. The graphic in the System Browser updates. Next. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. ) or 5 In the System Browser. and a new zone is created. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and verify the zones in the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view.Zoning is highlighted. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. indicating that the space is occupiable. To display space reference lines.

you can add or remove a space from the zone. and modify the zone properties. Instruction 221. In the System Browser. and click Finish Editing Zone. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. select Computer Lab 222.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. Using the Edit Zone tab. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). you need to activate the zone visibility. Instruction. type VG. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. To view the zone in the drawing area. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. Expand HVAC Zones. 5 With the drawing area active. and Electrical 220 spaces. select HVAC Zones. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). Click OK. 4 In the drawing area.

West . enter 2 . 11 Close the System Browser. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. under Identity Data. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK.Area B. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.Zoning. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. To display space reference lines. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. under Spaces. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and verify the zone in the System Browser. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). 5 Click in the Level 1 . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In this exercise. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 .rvt. click Finish Editing Zone. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . click Reference. indicating that it’s the active view. 9 In the System Browser. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. for Name. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.West . and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. 12 Close the file with or without saving it.Zoning is highlighted. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. expand 2 . you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building.TIP After you finish editing the zone. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it.Zoning view to activate it. You activated zone visibility in the views. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning view. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 8 In the Level 1 . click in the Level 2 . Select Attached End. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.Zoning floor plan. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.Zoning view. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 15 Press Esc. Verify that the distance is 12mm. zoom out. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you verify the building. double-click Level 1 . 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. space. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. and select 109 Lounge. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. In this exercise. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. verify that Wireframe is selected. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 .East. Front. on the ViewCube. and zone information.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. double-click the zone tag. 19 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. enter Lounge .Zoning view.Zoning to make it the active view. click the corner where the Top. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Name Value. click Training Files.

select 1_South_Area C. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. With 109 Lounge selected. Using the Highlight tool. ■ ■ On the Details tab. click (Isolate). ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. you isolate the space. ■ Click (Highlight). The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . All spaces in the zone display in isolation. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. Next.

and in the Space Type Settings dialog. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. and dehumidification set point. cooling air temperature. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. select 109 Lounge. This indicates the outdoor air per person. click (Shading). verify that 21. and click OK. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. verify that <Building> is selected. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type.22 °C : N/A is specified. and in the People dialog. This indicates the cooling set point. click . Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. This indicates the heating set point.22 °C : N/A is specified.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. For Cooling Information.33 °C : 12. and humidification set point. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. For Electrical Loads. Below the list of spaces and zones.11 °C : 32. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. Next. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. outdoor air per area. Next. scroll down in the left pane. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. For People. For Heating Information. heating air temperature. and then click OK. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. click . the zone information displays for the selected zone. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. ■ ■ ■ Next. verify that 23. select Lounge/Recreation. Below the list of spaces and zones. For Construction Type. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. the space information displays for the selected space. and then click OK. click . and air changes per hour. verify that <Building> is selected. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids.

NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. 15 In the Project Browser. open MEP . 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. enter 0. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Level 3. 12 Using the methods learned previously. and other room-bounding components. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. For Offset. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. floors. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. click Cancel. roofs. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume.

and verify that the space has replaced the void. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. Click OK. for Number. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. you verified building. Under Energy Analysis. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . Under Energy Analysis. and zone information. For Name. enter 212P. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. In this exercise. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. select Plenum. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. and select space Plenum 212P. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. space. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. select Plenum. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. Because this is an unoccupied space.

For Sliver Space Tolerance. this option adjusts the times automatically. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. For Ground Plane. double-click Level 2 . verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. click Edit. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. For Building Construction. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. for Energy Data. you need to select this option. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. For Location. In order to select a space. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. under Energy Analysis. verify that Level 1 is selected. verify that 300 is specified. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. NH. select space Library 219.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. and click Element Properties. For Postal Code. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. On the Weather tab. verify that New Construction is selected. verify that Manchester. under Volume Computations. For Project Phase. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. enter 03101. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.Space Plan. is selected. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Training Files. for City. For Export Complexity. select School or University. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. On the Place tab. verify that <Building> is specified. If. click in the Value field.rvt. right-click. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). for Building Service. 8 In the drawing area. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. Click OK twice. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog.

and click OK. click Edit. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. verify that Occupiable is selected. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. For Building Service. verify that <Building> is specified. for Values. select Specified. for Values. You have verified the building information.Audio Visual. enter 60 W. for Values. Select Area per person. click in the Value column. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. select Actual. select Heated and cooled. For People. For Location. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. Click OK. select Actual. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. Next. 12 Click the Details tab. For Sensible. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify that School or University is selected. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. a cooling load. for Values. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. and click to learn the cause for the warning. select Specified. For Condition Type. verify that Manchester. Under Power. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . and enter 15 sq. NH. For Latent. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. is specified. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. click Edit. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. m. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. both. Click OK twice. and then click . or neither. For Space Type.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. For Building Construction. Under Heat Gain (per Person). Select the space associated with the warning. enter 45 W. select Library .

verify that Heating Set Point is 21. and zone information for the building model. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. You should correct the space error in the building model. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. In this exercise. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. or make any changes to the model. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. 17 In the loads report. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click Information). and a loads report displays. weather. 21 Click OK. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. click Calculate. and can be modified here. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. 15 Review the loads report for project. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 16 After you review the loads report. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. and under Heating Information. 19 In the drawing area. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. select 219 Library. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays.11°C. and click OK. There should be no warnings displayed. or zone information. space. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. under Energy Analysis. select 219 Library.Space Plan. space. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Color Scheme. 3 In the drawing area. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. in relatively small increments. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. click to the right of the building to place the legend. 5 Zoom in to the legend. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . select HVAC Zones.rvt.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. Click OK. indicating that it’s the active view. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend.

Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. The new scheme displays in the view. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type.Expanded Ranges. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. select the color scheme legend. select Cooling Load . 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. under Schemes. and click OK.

Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. In the next exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 11 Using the method learned previously. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document.rvt. In this exercise. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m.

and click OK. select Spaces. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Click OK. more category options are available. For Phase. In the Fields dialog. select HVAC. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section.Space Fill is the active view. Click OK. In the Calculated Value dialog. and then click . 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . If you select Show categories from all disciplines. click (Browse). enter . select Calculated Supply Airflow. For Discipline. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter Space Airflow Schedule. For Type. For Name. select Air Flow. In the Schedule Properties dialog.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. for Formula. For Formula. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. for Select available fields from. Select Formula. Select Schedule building components. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. ■ Click Calculated Value. select Spaces. enter Airflow Delta. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select New Construction. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Under Available fields.

and then select Hidden field. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. For Fields. select red. right-click to access schedule properties. Under Conditions to Use. For Then by. For Background Color. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. Click OK twice. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. click the color swatch. verify that Show is highlighted. select Not Between. Header. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. select Level. ■ The schedule displays. select Number.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. a view opens that contains the selected space. Select Ascending. select Level. In the Color dialog. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . and click OK. and then click Conditional Format. and Blank line. For Value. select Airflow Delta. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range.

all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. In later exercises. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. In this exercise. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. In the next lesson. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. After system creation. Then. As you place the air terminals. 79 . you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you will create supply air systems. In this lesson. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. and work with the airflow schedule. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you modify air terminal parameters. After completing the air systems lesson.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . When you highlight a space using the cursor. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and scroll to space 223. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 3 In the ceiling view. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. the space crossing lines display. click Training Files.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. indicating that it’s the active view.

Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. 9 On the Placement panel. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. and press Enter. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. The schedule updates with the new flow data. click Place on Face. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. verify that Constrain is cleared. Also. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. and press Enter. 13 On the Options Bar. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. type 3600.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. If the host element is modified or moved. select the diffuser.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. the hosted elements are updated as well. which in this case is the ceiling grid. and then press Esc to end the command. 17 Move the cursor down. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. and then select both Copy and Multiple. for Flow. and select M_Supply Diffuser . Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. enter 215 L/s.

and then press Esc.rfa. 28 On the Placement tab. as shown. 24 In the Open dialog. click Yes. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 29 Place 2 diffusers.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 25 In the drawing area. 21 On the Options Bar. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. and click Open. click Place on Face. clear Leader. As you place the return diffusers. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. Next. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. select one of the diffusers. 22 In the drawing area. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s.

and click OK. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Other. select one of the return diffusers. for Reference. click Yes. 31 In the alert dialog. as shown. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . 32 In the Project Browser. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. select Strong Reference. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. and click to select the lines. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. Level.

and then select the top edge of the diffuser. as shown.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. and then press Esc twice. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. 43 Using the same method. align the other return diffuser. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select the vertical grid line as shown. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. 40 In the drawing area. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog.

and click OK. right-click. select both return diffusers. enter 310 L/s. 47 Using the same method. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Element Properties. and on the Options Bar. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. and press Enter. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left.44 While pressing Ctrl. for Flow. clear LeftArrow. under Mechanical. As you place the air terminals.

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. and double-click Level 1 . 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. the space crossing lines display. 9 On the Options Bar. for Scale. verify that Tag on Placement is selected.HVAC Plan . 8 In the Type Selector. expand HVAC . click to place the air terminal in the space as shown. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Design to make it the active view. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser. select M_Supply Diffuser . at the lower left corner of the building. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 2 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the drawing area. click Training Files.200 Neck. click 1 : 100.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view.

your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. Under Mechanical . Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser.Airflow. 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. for Offset. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. under Constraints. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. By copying the diffuser. Click OK. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. type 6000. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . 15 Press Esc. enter 170 L/s. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. move the cursor down. As a result. enter 2400. for Flow. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and then press Enter. 11 Select the diffuser. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing.

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar. clear Leader. and then press Esc. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .16 Using the same method. select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers.

you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. for Sort by. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. for Embedded Schedule. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. select 21. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. select Air Terminals.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. under Available Fields. 26 Using the method learned previously. 27 In the schedule. and press Enter. tile the windows. double-click System Type. click Edit. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Type. 25 Click OK 3 times. Next. for Flow. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. Mark. and then right-click in the schedule. 29 Using the same method. under space 115. under Other. it is a negative value. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. and Flow. select Mark. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). type. enter 210 L/s. For Category. mark. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. and click View Properties. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project.

As you highlight the zone. 31 In the drawing area.The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule. as shown.Design. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115.HVAC Plan . and maximize Level 1 . 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space.

33 Click OK. and under Energy Analysis.High Efficiency .3 times the heating load). 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. select M_WSHP .Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway.97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 .32 Open the Instance Properties dialog. 35 In the Type Selector.43 W (approximately 1.Horizontal . 36 In the drawing area. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command. zoom and pan to the double door for space 115.7-18 kW .

Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. As you add diffusers to systems. right-click the title. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. 6 Keep the System Browser open. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. However. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. the space crossing lines display. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. When you highlight a space. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog.HVAC Plan . all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. and click View ➤ Systems. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. click Training Files. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. including energy analysis. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter . Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. You then create the logical connection between the system components.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design is highlighted. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. After creating the logical connection. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . for Constraints ➤ Offset. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. and click OK. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. 44 Zoom in to space 115. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems.

9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 18 Click OK. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 17 Using the method learned previously. the air terminals are the children. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. 12 In the System Browser. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 11 In the drawing area. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. review the Number of Elements. 15 Click Cancel. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. and Flow value. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. the number of elements is updated. and the system connects them. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. On the Options Bar. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Connect Into. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. System Name. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223.

In this exercise. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. which updates the name in the System Browser. 26 Click Finish Editing System. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. for System Name. click Training Files. under Identity Data. 22 Click OK.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection.Rename the system Next. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. under Mechanical. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 25 Click OK. In this exercise. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. for Mark.

For Duct Type. 7 On the Options Bar.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. enter 3000.Round.Design is highlighted. For Offset. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. and display solution 1.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter 3000.HVAC Plan. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 5 On the Options Bar. Also. Select Branch. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . the space crossing lines display. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. For Flex Duct Type. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . A Generate Layout tab displays. indicating that it’s the active view. When you highlight a space using the cursor. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. for Solution Type. select Network. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . which provides various layout tools. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. For Duct Type. select the upper left diffuser. the Network type provides several solutions. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). For Offset. click Settings. 4 In the drawing area. In this case.

10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. 11 Click Finish Layout. as is the elbow itself.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. enter 900. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. For example. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. select a different layout solution. or manually modify the duct. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. or offset elevations are incorrect. you’ll get an error in a later step. as shown. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. click Modify. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. Either relocate the system components. Click OK.

Flow.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. fittings. The first time you press Tab. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. a disconnection exists. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. thus it is not part of the system. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. select Duct Color Fill . Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. and click to select it. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. Using a flow-based color scheme. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. and click OK. Usually. and equipment. for Color Scheme. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. highlight a segment of the main duct. If the entire network does not highlight.

98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. select By View. and on the Options Bar. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. but not all values are used in this view. select one of the diffusers in the system. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend.Airflow. for Values Displayed. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. and then click OK. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). 17 In the Type Properties dialog. under Mechanical . and press Enter. 20 In the drawing area. and click OK. under Graphics. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. for Flow. select the WSHP.

press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). and then press Esc to clear the selection. select Friction.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. for Branch Sizing. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog.65 Pa/m. select Duct Color Fill . 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. select Calculated Size Only. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select the color scheme legend. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. highlight a segment of the duct. Click OK. for Schemes. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. Select Only. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. and select 400. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 26 Click OK. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.Velocity. Select the upper segment of main duct. Select Restrict Height. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. and enter . click Cancel. and drag it to the right. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. Under Constraints. and then click to select it.

Use the information that displays (flow. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. pressure.The ductwork and fittings are updated. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. static pressure. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. Using this tool. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. and pressure loss.

also known as the critical path. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system.rvt.NOTE As you inspect a system. 35 Click Finish. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct.

indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct.Design is highlighted. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. and select the WSHP. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Draw Duct. and click to specify the end of the main duct. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).

3D MEP. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 On the ViewCube. for Offset. double-click MEP . 14 In the Project Browser. and click Draw Duct. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. NOTE When drawing duct. Front. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 11 On the Options Bar. enter 3000. right-click the connector grip. select the top right diffuser. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . click the corner where the Top.

21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. The ductwork is automatically created. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. it is considered a closed loop. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 19 In the drawing area. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. in space 115. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser.

and select the top left diffuser. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. 25 Press Esc.22 Using the same method. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. You can ignore the warning. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct.

32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 30 Press Esc twice.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. and then click Modify. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown.

37 Press Esc to clear the selection. select a segment of the main duct. and then click OK. for Flow.Airflow. clear Restrict Height. and click to select it. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Constraints. 40 Using the same method. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). and click OK. under Mechanical . such as a plenum.

108 .

In this lesson. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Automatically and manually lay out piping. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. 109 . you place mechanical equipment. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Create return and supply piping systems. Then. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. including 2 base mounted pumps. on level 3 of the building model.

7-18kW .Design is highlighted. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.HVAC Plan . in corridor 328. as shown.Left Return .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Horizontal High Efficiency . and select M_WSHP .Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. click Training Files. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

8 Click the corridor wall face. click the top edge of the WSHP.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. as shown. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 10 Select the WSHP. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . and click to place the dimension. verify that Wall faces is selected. click the dimension. 7 On the Options Bar. and enter 600. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number.

(Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. as shown.) 14 Click Modify. select the 2 WSHPs. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . verify that the WSHP is still selected.11 Press Enter and then press Esc. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. and in the Type Selector. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. for Offset. 21 Click Modify. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. for Water Flow. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. as shown. Under Mechanical. and click to place it in the mechanical room. enter 2750.75 L/s. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. enter 0. Click OK. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints.

Create the logical connection between the system components. Unlike logical connections (systems).22 Close the file with or without saving it. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. You can create pipes to connect system components. analyses cannot be performed. but without a corresponding system. including flow and pressure. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. you create the return and supply piping systems.

As you assign equipment to systems. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. In the System Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. This display indicates that the system is selected. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. Assigning a system component to an existing system. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. where it is easier to review the information. 5 In the System Browser. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . right-click the Systems column heading. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.Design is highlighted. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Mech 330).rvt.HVAC Plan . while pressing Ctrl. click Training Files. and click View ➤ Piping. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. select the 2 WSHPs. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. Therefore.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. indicating that it’s the active view. Creating a Piping System | 115 .

enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. and the Edit System tool is not active. 13 Click Finish Editing System. for System Name. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 10 On the Options Bar. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. Notice that on the Options Bar. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. You have created the hydronic return system. 12 In the drawing area. select the boiler. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 17 On the Options Bar. for System Name.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.

and bypasses the cooling tower. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click Roof . 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 25 Select the boiler. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.HVAC Plan . 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. In cooling mode.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 23 Close the roof plan view. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. and select the cooling tower. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 22 In the Select Connector dialog.Design. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. In heating mode. and click OK. under Design ➤ HVAC .

You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). for Water Flow. you can view several parameters.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. and click Properties.8. expand the Hydronic Return system category. under Mechanical. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. You also manually modify the layout path as required. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Expand All. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. including the flow rate and size of the component. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. 28 Using the same method. enter 0. 29 Right-click CHWS. expand Piping. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Column Settings. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. and click Select. and click OK. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. 32 In the System Browser. In the System Browser. and click OK. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. indicating the logical connection.

A system preview displays in red. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. select Mechanical Equipment. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space .Mech 330). 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). and click to select it. When you draw a box to select components. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. you can place the cursor over a system component. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. click Check None. then the Select a System dialog displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted.HVAC Plan . You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. the boiler. click Training Files. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . 5 In the Filter dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . press Tab to highlight the system. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. and click OK.

The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. structural beams. enter 450.9 In the Select a System dialog. select CHWR. select Perimeter. 11 On the Options Bar. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. It does not reference the architecture. duct. 13 Click Cancel. For Inset. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. verify that Solutions is selected. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 10 Click OK. click Settings. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. or architectural components. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created.

click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment.16 Click Finish Layout. 19 In the drawing area. With each Tab. to display the path with thinner lines. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. 17 Optionally. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 .75 L/s. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. the flow for each WSHP is 0. and press Tab 3 times. Verify the flow In a previous exercise.

23 Under Mechanical. verify that the value for Flow is 1. and click OK.50 L/s. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0.75 L/s). notice that the Water Flow is 1. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. and click OK.50 L/s.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 24 Press Esc. under Mechanical. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 22 Select the boiler. and access its instance properties.

29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 28 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . click Edit System. 32 Click Finish Editing System.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. the Number of Elements is now 8. 27 On the System Tools panel. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. double-click Level 1 . 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. Logically.Design. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR).HVAC Plan . On the Options Bar.

and click Cancel. access its instance properties. note that the value for Flow is 4. so the total flow of 6. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. you physically close the CHWR loop. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. 38 Using the same method. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. 35 Using the drag control. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. which propagates flow throughout the system.50 L/s. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1.94 L/s. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. Next. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. under Mechanical.44 L/s. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously.94 L/s.

40 In the Select a System dialog. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. enter 450.00%. 41 Click OK. select CHWS. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). and then click OK. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. select a WSHP. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. select Perimeter 1 of 5. Click Settings.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Inset. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. enter 0. For Slope. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove.

48 While pressing Ctrl. as shown. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. 47 In the drawing area. In a later exercise.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. (Both sections are at the same elevation. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. 46 Click Modify.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path.

49 Select the 4-way arrow control. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. 51 Click Finish Layout. Either relocate the system components. or offset elevations are incorrect. To create the piping system. as shown. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. or manually modify the pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . 50 Using the same method. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. select a different layout solution.

As you work in the training file. double-click 3D Building. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. In the left pane of the Open dialog.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click Training Files. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. and the return pipes are magenta. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. as shown.Design ➤ 3D Views.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop.HVAC Plan .

7 In the plan view. select the section of piping. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 .Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 6 Press Delete. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. as shown.

■ Click to move the piping. and press Esc to clear the selection. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 9 In the 3D view. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. Click to specify the reference point. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the boiler.

The connections are automatically created. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. select the return pipe riser. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). 12 In the 3D view. select the boiler. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. and the boiler is connected to the return piping.11 In the Select Connector dialog. and the lower one is secondary. 13 In the plan view. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and click Draw Pipe. and click OK.

16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. and you select 1 connector. Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. enter 381. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. and press Enter. enter 600. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump.In a plan view. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. ■ Move the cursor down. for Offset. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments.

select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. 19 In the plan view. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 18 Press Esc twice. and the appropriate fittings are created. select the primary base mounted pump. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. and click OK.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. As you place piping runs that are close together. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 .

and click Draw Pipe. and select it. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. you select the tee fitting. and click the minus symbol. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and click to draw the pipe.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. as shown. right-click the bottom connector. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow.

27 Move the cursor to the right. click to connect to the pump. and when the connector point displays. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .

zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. for Offset. and click Draw Pipe. 31 On the Options Bar. 29 If necessary. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter 1200. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. and click to create the pipe. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view.28 Press Esc. select the primary base mounted pump. right-click the discharge connector.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . these pipe connections were created automatically.33 Press Esc. Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps.

right-click the bottom control on the tee. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. 35 Using the method learned previously.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . type 300. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.■ Move the cursor down. enter 2850. for Offset. and click to create the pipe. and press Enter. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown.

37 Click Modify. you validate the flow through the system. You now have a closed loop system. Next. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

When you create the pumps in parallel. under Mechanical. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. 44 In the 3D view. select the cooling tower. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. notice that under Mechanical. which is rounded up to 3.44 L/s. as shown. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. right-click. 48 In the plan view.50 or 50% of the Flow. 42 Click OK. the value is 0 L/s. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. and click Element Properties. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 43 Press Esc.44 L/s). view the properties for the secondary pump. In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. and click Element Properties. for Cooling Water Flow. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 .Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. 46 Press Esc. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. The flow is being propagated through the piping. 41 Using the same method. 40 Click Cancel. right-click. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. notice that Flow is 6. Connect the cooling tower Next. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors.

■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). ■ Lower pipe (outlet). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

44 L/s. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 .Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. and close the dialog. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. 50 In the 3D View. select the cooling tower. 49 Press Esc.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is highlighted. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. click Training Files. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . as shown. and is heated by the boiler. When the valve is open. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m.HVAC Plan . Adding Valves In this exercise. Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. the water bypasses the cooling tower. In the left pane of the Open dialog.52 Close the file with or without saving it. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.

and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. Adding Valves | 145 . 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. and select M_Ball Valve . 8 Press Esc twice. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve.4 On the Options Bar. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. The bypass valve is closed by default.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down.

50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. place another M_Ball Valve . parallel to the previously placed valve. 14 Using the same method. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .10 Press Esc. 12 Select M_Ball Valve . 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.

Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. under Mechanical. and click Element Properties.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. Adding Valves | 147 . and click OK. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve.44 L/s. right-click. validate that the Flow is 6. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. 19 Using the same method.

(This valve allows the water to flow through it.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). In heating mode.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. Initially. 22 Using the method you just learned.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Select the bypass valve. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.44 L/s. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. click Training Files. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. Sizing Pipe In this exercise.44 L/s. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. and select M_Ball Valve . The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6. and select M_Ball Valve . validate that the Flow is 6. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s.

2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. for Schemes. and click OK. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. click Pipe Color Fill . 8 Press Esc to clear the selection.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. Sizing Pipe | 149 . and click OK. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. indicating that it’s the active view. as shown.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.Flow.Size. select Pipe Color Fill . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.

press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. enter 1. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 13 Press Esc. select Friction.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. Under Constraints. and click to select the branch. or manually modify the pipe. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. Select And. for Branch Sizing. Click OK. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Either relocate the system components. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. or offset elevations are incorrect. and enter 220 Pa/m.5 m/s. select a different layout solution. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and for Velocity.

3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. click Training Files. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system.14 Close the file with or without saving it. and double-click 3D Building. pressure. Inspecting the System In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. Using the System Inspector. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately.Design ➤ 3D Views.rvt. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. Inspecting the System | 151 .

the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. and pressure information including pressure loss. flow. An inspection flag reports the section number. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. as shown. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. This information helps you modify the system design. as required.NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection).

and double-click Level 3 . Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty.HVAC Plan .Design. click Training Files. 9 Using the same method. for Fluid Temperature.7. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. targeting those systems that need attention.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. In this exercise.rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project.Note that the Flow is 1. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. 11 Close the file with or without saving it.0 L/s. you need to validate them. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. Warnings display. and the Pressure Loss is 7160. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Checking Piping Systems | 153 .1 Pa. the Static Pressure is 41916. 10 Click Finish. inspect Section 6 again. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. select 32° C.4 Pa. and to size pipe. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems.

click Close. expand the Unassigned folder. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. 12 In the System Browser. and select Level 3 . 7 In the System Browser. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views.Design floor plan. 9 Right-click CHWS. 4 In the System Browser. As you learned when placing components. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. TIP If you have multiple views open. thus assigning the components to a system. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them.Design ➤ Floor Plans. otherwise.HVAC Plan . right-click the Systems titlebar.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems.HVAC Plan . The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. right-click Hydronic Return. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . After you assign components to a system. and click View. the pipe is associated with that system. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. double-click Level 1 . 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. If you place components without assigning them to a system. 6 In the Project Browser. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. and click Show to view all of the system components.Design. For example. 10 Using the same methods. and click Expand All. After you have assigned all components to systems. In the System Browser. and for pipe sizing. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. and confirm unassigned system components. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). The dashed red lines represent the logical connection.

13 Right-click CHWR. Checking Piping Systems | 155 . 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 14 Using the methods that you learned. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.

156 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 157 .

158 .

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . Define required lighting. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.

4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. Select Correction Factor.rvt.Wire Sizes. expand Wiring . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. For Temperature. For Material. and demand factors that are applied in the design. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. distribution systems. As you place components and create circuits. enter 1. For Factor. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. click (Open). ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. select Copper. click Training Files. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. enter 70. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. enter THHN. Click OK.04. speeding up the design phase. ■ ■ For Material. wiring. You also add a wiring type. select Copper. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Wiring Types. ■ Click New Correction Factor. In this exercise you review electrical settings. select 90.

select 240. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. For L-G Voltage. For Neutral Size. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. By specifying a range. enter 220. For L-L Voltage. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter 120/240. select Voltage Definitions. select 120. select 75. Select Neutral Required. select THHN. Click Split. For Neutral Multiplier.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. select Demand Factors. enter 240. select Power.0. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Distribution Systems. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. enter 250. For Value. For Insulation. select Hot Conductor Size. Click OK. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. enter 240. For Conduit Type. For Maximum. For Wires. enter 2000. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. For Max Size. For Phase. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. Under More Than. For Minimum. select Single. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. select 10000 VA. enter 1. select 3. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . enter 50. select Steel. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building.

Design ➤ Floor Plans. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. and conference rooms. In this case the key style is the type of space and. Click OK twice. Verify that Instance is selected. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. For Type of Parameter. Later in the tutorial. click (Open). restrooms. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. Under Categories. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. 5 In the drawing area. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser.Lighting group in the space element properties. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level). under the Electrical . click Training Files. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. enter Required Lighting Level. click Add. such as offices.Lighting Plan. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. For Discipline. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. select Illuminance. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog.rvt. and double-click Level 2 .Lighting. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Spaces. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. select Electrical . select Electrical.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. For Group Parameter Under.

under Electrical . 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. and for Key Name. select Spaces. enter Open Office. enter 485. Click OK.Lighting. under Available Fields. double-click Required Lighting Level. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . For Name. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. and click OK. enter Space Lighting Requirements. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. enter Lighting Levels. Select Schedule Keys. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties.Lighting Plan. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. select Required Lighting Level. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . click Edit. 21 Click OK twice.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . change the sort order back to the default setting. for Sorting/Grouping. which is mapped to project units. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. 22 Using the same method. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. Notice that as you enter the data. Select Blank Line. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By.

Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open). for Lighting Levels. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. In this exercise. the value input applies only to the selected space.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. 27 Click OK. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. select Instruction-Standard. that Required Lighting Level is blank. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. under Identity Data. Later in this exercise.

for Name. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. Select the scheme for 450. enter 900. ■ Click OK. and click (Add Value).00. For example. Select the scheme for 500 lx. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. and press Enter. Select the scheme for At Least 20. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. for Title. click (Duplicate). Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. select Spaces. and press ENTER.00. enter Required Lighting Levels.00 lx. For Color. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. 00 lx still selected. verify the By Range is selected. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. and press ENTER.rvt. and click (Add Value) five times. click Training Files. Under Schemes. and in the At Least column. for Category. enter 800. enter Required Lighting and click OK. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. then the new value will be 400 lx. enter 200. click (Add Value) again.00 lx.00 lx. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. select Required Lighting Level.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add.

7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. For Color Scheme. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Lighting CF. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. for Available Fields. Click OK. select Required Lighting. select Illuminance. double-click Number. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . enter Lighting Delta. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . 13 Click Calculated Value. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. select Electrical. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. For Discipline. Level. and double-click Level 2 . and Required Lighting Level. For Type. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. select Spaces. select Spaces. Name. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. For Name. 8 In the drawing area. Average Estimated Illumination.

select Level. For Value. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. Select Header. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. Click OK. select Lighting Delta. Click Background Color. On the Formatting tab. for Fields. under Condition. Click Conditional Format. select Not Between. select Required Lighting Level. and click Browse. Select Blank Line. for Custom Colors. for Sort by. click Browse. select Red. Click OK twice. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. for Formula. type a hyphen. select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK three times. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. for Test. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. press the spacebar. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . ■ ■ In the Fields dialog.■ For Formula.

The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 . 16 Close the file with or without saving it.

170 .

Then. Create power loads. as you place lighting fixtures. Create a panel schedule. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Use the System Browser to check your design. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. First. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. power circuits. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. 171 .

2 In the drawing area. 7 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Click OK. By using orange as the color for this range.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . click Training Files.Lighting CF view is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. select Orange. select the color legend. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m.Lighting Ceiling plan. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 8 In the Project Browser. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for the Spaces Category. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. Under Scheme Definition. In the Color dialog. click (Open). You can create additional color schemes. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. select Average Estimated Illumination. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. for Basic Colors.rvt.

As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. zoom to space Library 219. 13 Click the Level 2 . indicating a value greater than 0 fc. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. which is the lowest value in the specified range. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. all three of these colored fields will clear to white.

The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . In the Space Lighting Analysis view.5 fc range is satisfied. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 20 Select the lighting fixture. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.the +/. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. the fixtures will move accordingly.277V. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.5 fc range. 18 Click to place the fixture. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . scroll to view space space Library 219. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. for Name enter and click OK. for Apparent Load. enter 162. ■ Under Electrical Loads. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate.00 VA. In the Name dialog. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view.

Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. for Lamp. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse.93. 9 In space Library 219. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. click the value for Initial Color. click the value for Initial Intensity. Under Photometrics. ■ Click Apply. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. Junction Boxes. enter F15. Click OK. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Under Electrical. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. Under Photometrics. Placing Switches. click Training Files. select T5 [HO]. ■ Under Photometrics. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. ■ Click OK twice. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Ballast Loss Factor. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. click the value for Light Loss Factor. and receptacles to your design. enter . ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. select 463T5_S. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.ies and click Open. In the Select File dialog. Under Photometrics. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m.rvt.00 lm. enter . 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. and Receptacles | 183 . junction boxes. click (Open). you add switches. select Xenon and click OK. 2 In the drawing area. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. select Luminous Flux. In the next exercise. and click OK.85. select the top center fixture. for Color Preset. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. specify 15000.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for Type Mark.

277V. 7 Click to place the switch. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.

Placing Switches. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.NoLoad. Junction Boxes.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector. and Receptacles | 185 . 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. The element type M_Junction Boxes . Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 12 In the Load Family dialog.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Select M_Junction Boxes . 9 Press ESC to end the command.rfa and click Open.

Click OK twice. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. NOTE When entering values. enter 2750. enter JB-1NL.Offset. In the Type Properties dialog. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 21 In the drawing area. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. Click Edit Type.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. for Level 2 . 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Under Electrical. for Mark. zoom to space Library 219.14 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. 15 Select the junction box. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. note the Number of Poles is 1. you can enter a space to separate the unit values.

NOTE If necessary. and Receptacles | 187 . Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. 24 For any column. Select Load. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. and Number of Elements. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Expand Electrical. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. right-click and click Column Settings. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. 26 In the System Browser. Placing Switches. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. and Voltage. Space Name. Space Number. Distribution System.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Select Size. Junction Boxes. Expand General. 23 In the System Browser. Click OK. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219.

28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 31 Close the System Browser. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown.

select Copy and Multiple. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 189 . 40 On the Options Bar. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 38 Select the receptacle. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. Placing Switches. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. move the cursor along the wall. and enter 3650 and press ENTER.

42 Move the cursor down. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 43 Press ESC to end the command.

Junction Boxes. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. and Receptacles | 191 .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. Placing Switches. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.

you need to create logical connections to define the topology. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings.rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . zoom to the space Electrical 220. click (Open).208V MCB . Adding wiring to a project is optional. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . click Training Files.equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the drawing area.Surface: 100A. and work toward the higher voltage.

17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical .5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 8 Select the panelboard. for Max.Loads. enter LP-2B. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. select 480/277 Wye. 9 On the Options Bar. For Panel Name. enter 20. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 20.Loads. for Distribution System.480V MCB . 15 On the Options Bar. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . #1 Pole Breakers. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. select 120/208 Wye. Click OK. For Panel Name. Click OK.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. enter PP-2B. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 14 Select the panelboard. for Distribution System. 7 Press ESC to end the command. #1 Pole Breakers. for Max.

Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. and for Category. zoom to space Instruction 221. which is the logical connection between the elements. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. 20 In the drawing area. Click OK. 23 In the Filter dialog.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. click Check None. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 28 Press ESC to end the command. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way.

34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down.31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 32 Press ESC. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Select the switch on the right.

36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 38 Press ESC to end the command.35 Select the left three-way switch. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

click (Open). select Wires. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.39 Using the same method.rvt. and for Category. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . except without wire. Next you create circuits without showing wire. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 2 In the drawing area. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 42 In the Filter dialog. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . click Training Files. Click OK. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. for Hot Conductors. Click OK. and create permanent wiring. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. click Check None. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. enter 2. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.Loads.

13 In the System Browser. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. expand Power. Distribution System. Voltage. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. right-click on the Systems heading. and Voltage Drop are selected. and then expand circuit 1. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. and verify that Load. Expand Electrical. ■ 16 In the System Browser. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. Click OK. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. Rating. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit.

23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 22 With the junction box still selected. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Click OK. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click Tags. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 30 Close the System Browser. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. under Electrical. change the Voltage to 277V.

select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . notice the label parameters and click Cancel. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. click Edit Type. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 35 Press ESC to end the command. enter FR4. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . Click OK. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. click below the first one to place it.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. select Break. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Click Yes. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 47 In the drawing area. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. for Type Mark. under Identity Data. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Circuit Number. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 40 Click OK twice. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area.

and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag.rfa.rvt. and click Apply. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 54 Select all of the tags. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Click OK. 52 In the Save As dialog. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 57 In the Filter dialog. 62 Close the file with or without saving it.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. click Check None. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. select Lighting Fixture Tags. for File Name. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. Click Save. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Next you create a switch system. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. click (Open). enter a comma. and for Category. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag.

Creating a Switch System | 205 . 2 In the drawing area. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. Click OK. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. for Switch ID.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. under Electrical Lighting. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. enter a.

18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. under Electrical . 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. Click OK. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System.Lighting. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. enter b. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. for switch ID. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties.

for Hot Conductors. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and for Category.26 Close the file with or without saving it. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. Circuits are used for power. click (Open). 4 In the Filter dialog. Creating Power Loads | 207 .Loads. under Electrical . 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and data systems. lighting. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. select the PP-2B panel. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Check None. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 2 In the drawing area. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. click Training Files. enter 2. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. select Electrical Fixtures. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. Next you create a circuit and size wire. Click OK. and click Element Properties. 7 In space Electrical 220.rvt.

rfa. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. select Wiring. and in the drawing area. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.13 Select the wire again. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 15 In the Load Family dialog. and click Open. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane. and click to select the circuit. 19 Click OK. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark.

25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. as shown. 26 Press Delete. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 29 In space Instruction 221. select the PP-2B panel. as shown. 22 In space Electrical 220. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. click the connector of the first receptacle. 28 In the drawing area.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Power Loads | 209 . and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. in space Instruction 221. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. Next you balance the loads for your design.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222.

Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Click OK. Scroll down. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. 6 Click OK. 1-#10. Had there been a greater imbalance. Finally. select panel LP-2B. for Rating. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same.rvt. After re-balancing loads. 1-#12. click Rebalance Loads. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. 1-#10. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . click Open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. the distribution is shifted. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. zoom to space Electrical 220. enter 30A. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. click Training Files. 1-#12. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. Under Electrical-Loads. 3 In the Electrical space. 2 In the drawing area.

16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 14 Close the warning dialog. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit.Loads. and click Finish Editing Circuit. 24 Click Select Panel. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 17 Close the warning dialog. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. select the transformer TP-2B. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Next you create a panel schedule. under Electrical . 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. enter 25A. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. and click OK. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. enter 40A. 12 Select panel PP-2B. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. for Rating.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. and click OK. for Rating. under Electrical .Loads. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 15 Select panel PP-2B.

enter 5 mm. The Panel Schedule Report displays.rvt. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. expand Sheets (all). under Other. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. for Appearance. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. for Font. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. enter 4 mm. for Font Size. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. select Bold and Italic. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule.Panel Schedules. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 6 In the Project Browser. Under Body Text. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. click Training Files. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. click (Open). 4 Close the report. select Berlin Sans FB. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. Select PP-2B. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . for Font Size. Click OK. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. and open E601 . 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. 10 Click OK twice. click Edit. 5 In the Project Browser. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Under Header Text. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. Under Header Text. drag PP-2B onto the sheet.

and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. select space Lounge 212. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Expand Unassigned. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. click (Open). 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1.rvt. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. click Training Files. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. each with a load of 180VA. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. press TAB once. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. In the System Browser. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall.

14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. zoom to space Electrical 214. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. for Panel. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 20 On the Options Bar. select MDP-1. In the System Browser. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Checking Your Design | 215 . Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. 15 In the dialog. under Warnings. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 18 Select panel LP-2C.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 16 Close the details dialog. 17 In the drawing area.

216 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 .

218 .

and click Properties. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. Adding a pipe size. In this exercise.rvt. 4 In the Name dialog. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. 219 .Plumbing Plan . and verify that Level 1 . and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. planning is critical to a successful design. in addition to loading existing families. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In this lesson. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. click Duplicate. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. type PVC . right-click PVC . 3 In the Type Properties dialog.Sanitary.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project.Vent. you create a PVC pipe type. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 54.DWV: Standard.5 In the Type Properties dialog. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings.000 mm. In the Project Browser. enter -1250. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 15 For System Type. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . under Pipe Types. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. click Training Files. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog.rfa. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 13 In the right panel. select None. 27 For the new pipe size. select Plastic. select Sanitary.PVC .Sch 40 . DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. for Material.006 mm. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 24 For Inside Diameter. and click Main. 6 Click OK.PVC . enter 45. 22 Click New Size. click Pipe Settings.Sch 40 . 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . select Tee. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 18 For System Type. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. for Nominal. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.DWV: Standard.293 mm.DWV. 17 In the left pane. 21 In the right pane. and click OK. select M_Tee Sanitary . enter 46.Sch 40 . enter 10°.Vent is listed. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. Tap. select Sanitary. For Offset. under Mechanical. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. Cross. and open Metric\M_Trap P . Tee. 10 On the Selection panel. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 25 For Outside. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. 26 Click OK. click Modify. PVC .PVC . select Branch.

add a hot water heater. Create the hot water system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. including plumbing fixtures. sanitary piping. Create the cold water system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. 221 . and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. vent.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. and hot and cold water piping. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create the sanitary plumbing system.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

select one of the components in the system. A preview of the piping layout displays. as shown. The base is placed. select Sanitary 107. a toilet. for example. at the midpoint of the detail lines. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. and click OK. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 16 In the Select a System dialog. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view.

22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. click Solutions. 26 For Pipe Type. select PVC . and modify it to meet project requirements. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. and click OK. select Main.Sanitary. 28 On the Options Bar. enter -1225. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. and click Settings. enter 1. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. 29 On the Options Bar. 24 For Offset. enter -350 mm. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. 25 In the left pane. 21 On Options Bar. select Intersections. 23 For Pipe Type. 20 On the Generate Layout panel.19 On the Options Bar. select PVC . 27 For Offset. and for Offset. You accept this suggested solution. for Solution Type.Sanitary. enter -350 mm. for Diameter. The default settings are automatically modified. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .05%. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. 30 Click Modify. select 100 mm. select Branch. for Slope.

32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). select the vertical route path segments.Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point.

as shown. as shown. 34 Click Modify.33 In the 3D view. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.36 Using the previous method. 37 On the Generate Layout panel. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . click Finish Layout.

Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . select the fitting and click to reorient it.Overall. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. When a fitting is reversed. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain.

adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. as shown. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. you continue with the work from the last exercise. and check the slope control.40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system.

Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. as shown.Rectangular.Public. select 560 mmx560 mm . in the Type Selector. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line. and verify that Level 1 .Plumbing Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 On the Element panel.Design is open. under M_Lavatory . click Training Files. 5 On the Placement panel. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m.

7 Click Modify. select Multiple. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . On the Options Bar. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. enter 711. and press Enter to create a second sink. 8 Select the sink. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.2.

238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Press Esc. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 12 In the drawing area. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 11 In the System Browser. click Add To System. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and press Enter to create the third sink.2. 15 Click the 3 sinks. enter 711.

and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. double-click 3D Plumbing . Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. as shown.Overall. under Design ➤ Plumbing . In the System Browser. 21 Select the tee. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system.16 On the Edit System panel. 19 In the 3D view. 20 Select the fitting. use the ViewCube to orient the view. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal.Design ➤ 3D Views. click Finish Editing System.

and click Draw Pipe. press Spacebar. for Offset. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . When you press the Spacebar. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. and click Apply. 27 Click Modify. 26 On the Options Bar. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). enter 1. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. with the tee fitting selected. and click to draw the pipe. enter 760 mm. for Slope.05%. 24 On the Options Bar.22 In the plan view.

click to place the fitting.PVC . select Standard.DWV.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 31 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . 29 In the Type Selector. move the cursor over the stub pipe.Sch 40 . 30 In the 3D view. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 32 Select the double wye fitting. and when the vertical center line displays.

enter 305 mm. In the next steps. you add pipe segments to the double wye. and press Enter. for Offset. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. and press Enter. enter 150 mm. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 37 Select the fitting. right-click the right connector. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. on the Options Bar. double-click the section head to open the section view. 36 In the section view. and click Draw Pipe. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .33 With the fitting selected. 34 Press Esc. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view.

draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°).Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 42 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 40 Click Modify. and click to place the pipe. 41 Using the same method. as shown. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting.

and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. right-click the bottom connector.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. 49 Using the same method. 47 Move the cursor down. and press Esc. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. press Spacebar. 48 Click Modify. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 46 In the section view. enter 150 mm.

PVC . 55 In the 3D view. select Standard. select the P-Trap on the left.Sch 40 .DWV.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. 54 Click Modify. 51 In the Type Selector. 53 Using the same method. under M_Trap P . You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 56 Using the same method. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 52 In the plan view.

Click in the plan view. In the plan view. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. 58 Using the same method. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the right sink to the double wye. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. Move the cursor to the left. and press Enter. select the left P-Trap. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Select the double wye pipe on the left.. Click Modify. and click Draw Pipe.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. enter 150 mm.

On the Routing Solutions panel. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. and select a proposed solution. select PVC Sanitary. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. as shown.■ In the 3D view. under Pipe Types. while pressing Ctrl. select the section of pipe you just drew. while pressing Ctrl. Press Esc. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. click Finish to select the recommended solution. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. In the Type Selector. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points.

05% is selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. verify that 1. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. adjusting the sanitary stack. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 62 On the Options Bar. for Slope. click Training Files. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. You have appropriately sloped the pipe.rvt. and verify the slope. click Finish. you continue with the work on the sanitary system.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m.

Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and click the intersection to place the fitting. click Modify. select the vertical stack. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . as shown. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1.Overall. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan . right-click the top connector. 5 Select the tee.Design. 7 On the Selection panel.Floor level line. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and click Draw Pipe. 10 In the 3D view. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend . 9 In the Type Selector.Design.DWV. and click to draw the pipe.PVC . 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. select the elbow fitting on the right. 3 In the Section view.Sch 40 . select Standard.

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.43 In the 3D view. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe.

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .

266 .

click Training Files. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. After finishing each exercise. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. In this tutorial. and click Duplicate. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. In the left pane of the Open dialog.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. go to http://www. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. If the tutorial training files are not present. However. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. 267 . You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. In this lesson.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. You create a new pipe type. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers.autodesk. 2 Right-click Standard. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. you can choose to save your work. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.

10 Close the file with or without saving it. under Mechanical. 6 In the Project Browser. For System Type. 9 Click OK. However. you modify the type properties of the pipe. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. select Fire Protection Wet. and then click OK. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. For System Type. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. and click Properties. For Pipe Type. select Main. For Offset. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. For Offset. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. you create project parameters and work with schedules. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). or architectural components. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . for Material. click Rename. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. In the next exercise. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. structural beams. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. In this exercise. In the left pane. For Pipe Type. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. duct. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. verify that 2800 is selected. select Fire Protection Wet. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. select Carbon Steel. verify that 2800 is specified. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. Next. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. and enter Fire Protection Wet. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2.

Fire Protection Piping Plan . enter Zone 1. click Add. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Under Categories. and then click OK. under Fire Protection. enter Sprinkler Zone. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. select Spaces. click Training Files. 5 Click OK twice.Design is highlighted. 6 In the drawing area. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . right-click.rvt. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . and click Element Properties. 8 Using a crossing window. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Group parameter under. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Name. select space Instruction 221 as shown. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. the space crossing lines display. for Sprinkler Zone.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Fire Protection. indicating that it’s the active view. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. select the upper half of the building.

select Zone 1. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. and click OK. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click Training Files.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. for Sprinkler Zone. under Fire Protection. you create schedules for sprinkler design. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. verify that only Spaces are selected. 10 In the Filter dialog. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Using the same method. for Sprinkler Zone. and then click OK. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. to which you add various parameters. and then access instance properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . enter Zone 2. and then click OK. under Fire Protection. including a calculated value parameter. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise.

indicating that it’s the active view. The schedule displays. select Spaces. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Rounding.Fire Protection Piping Plan . ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select mm. Click OK. 14 Select the new header. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. enter Protection Area Construction Type. select 0 decimal places. For Key name. click the Formatting tab. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . select Millimeters. select Maximum Spacing. for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. click Add Parameter. For Unit symbol. 11 Click OK twice.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For Group parameter under. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. Select Schedule keys. and click Field Format. For Type of Parameter. enter Maximum Spacing. select Length. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 10 In the Format dialog. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. 9 On the Formatting tab. double-click on each column separator. For Units. Click OK. Obstructed-Combustible. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. 6 Using the same method. enter Light. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. select Fire Protection. For Name. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. and on the ribbon. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 7 Click OK.

Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. NOTE The units of measure display automatically.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Unobstructed Extra. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. 16 Using the same method. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. enter 4575. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . enter 40. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Click OK. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Unobstructed Ordinary. select Spaces. and press Enter. For Name.

For Discipline. For Units. For Formula. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. select 0 decimal place. and click OK. select Fixed. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. 22 Click OK twice. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. click . and click Field Format. select Common. enter Minimum Sprinklers. For Type. For Rounding. Enter the formula operator / after Area. In the Fields dialog. select Area. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. select Minimum Sprinklers.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. select Number. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. 19 Click the Formatting tab. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. 20 On the Formatting tab. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). under Available fields. Click OK.

For Fields. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Select Header and Blank line. select Level. select Grand totals.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. select Level. For Fields. ■ In the Format dialog. At the bottom of the dialog. select Sprinkler Zone. and then click Field Format. and then select Hidden field. for Sort by. verify that Use default settings is selected. for Sorting/Grouping. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Other. select Sprinkler Zone. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. Select Header and Blank line. select Hidden field. 26 Click OK 3 times. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . For Then by (second instance). and click View Properties. and select Totals only. select Minimum Sprinklers. click Edit. Under Field formatting. For Then by. select Number. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields.

select Grand totals. select Level equals Level 2. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. and click View Properties. and click View Properties. For Category. select Calculate totals. 30 Click OK twice. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. select Embedded Schedule. System Name. Under Field formatting. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. right-click the schedule. under Other. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. for Fields. and select Totals only. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. and Count. for Available fields. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. On the Formatting tab. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . for Embedded Schedule. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. for Filter. delete the word Maximum. click Edit.27 In the drawing area. double-click Type. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. for Filter by. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. select Count. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. select Sprinklers. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Edit.

276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 48 In the floor plan. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. for Protection Area Construction Type. 46 With the space still selected. under Identity Data. and click OK. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). for Protection Area Construction Type. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. and the spacing parameter values are evident.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. select Ordinary. 41 In the plan view. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Fire Protection Plan Design. 52 Click OK. under Identity Data. select Ordinary. Unobstructed. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. under Identity Data. select space 221 Instruction. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. Unobstructed. 44 In the schedule. and access the instance properties. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. 43 Click Cancel. Unobstructed. As a result. but their values are not determined. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. click in the floor plan to make it the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select space 221 Instruction. double-click FP . select Light. 50 Access the instance properties. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.autodesk. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project.rvt. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. and double-click Level 2 . methodology. you can choose to save your work. As you place the sprinklers. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. At the end of this tutorial. By following the recommended workflow. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . click Training Files. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. After finishing each exercise. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. However. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. go to http://www. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. As you create the system. you will understand the process. If the tutorial training files are not present. 279 .FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 3 In the Project Browser. After placing the initial sprinkler. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. When this happens. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. When there is a small misalignment. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient.

and 207. and click to place 3 sprinklers. verify that Constrain is cleared. Also. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. while pressing Ctrl. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 11 In the drawing area. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . 206. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. select the sprinklers that you placed. 9 In space Instruction 202. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 10 Press Esc twice. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. 13 On the Options Bar. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown.

and 200C). open Design ➤ FP . as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 18 Type WT. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. you place non-hosted sprinklers. specify a vertical offset. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. Next. and then press Esc. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section.Design.Fire Protection Piping Plan . 200B. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 17 In the Project Browser.

zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. and click Element Properties. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. 29 Press Esc. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. In the next exercise. for Offset.FP_Ceiling view. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. Next. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. For Number. After creating the logical connection. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection).0. This number is determined in the schedule. under Constraints. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. and press Enter. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 .19 In the floor plan. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. 25 Click OK. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. and with piping (physical connection). it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. you adjust the offset. enter 4100. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . In this exercise. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. enter 11. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. Notice that the schedule updates. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. move the cursor to the right. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter 2900 mm.

as shown.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. indicating that it’s the active view. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. As you assign sprinklers to systems.Design is highlighted. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and select Piping. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP.Fire Protection Plan . piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. 5 Right-click the header. Unlike logical connections (systems). click View ➤ Systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . However. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.

double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. press Tab. indicating the logical connection. named Fire Protection Wet.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. and select the system. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. In the System Browser. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. 11 With the system still selected. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. and click Select. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. Creating a Piping System | 285 . you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. select an initial piping layout. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Next. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . place the cursor over a sprinkler. within the Piping Systems folder.

and number of elements in the system. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 22 On the Options Bar. 23 For Offset. click Solutions. for System Name.Wet is selected. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. For Offset. 15 In the drawing area. enter FP Wet_Zone2. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). When the layout is finished. 14 Click Finish Editing System. select Branch. click Settings. select 150 mm. and on the Options Bar. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. In the left pane. The Generate Layout tools are activated. system equipment.0 is specified. verify that Main is selected. verify that 2800. for Diameter. providing system editing tools. 13 In the System Browser. click Place Base.The Edit Piping System panel displays. enter -3650. as shown. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. For Pipe Type. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 19 Click OK. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 12 On the Options Bar. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. and a piping layout preview displays. 20 On the Generate Layout panel.

Creating a Piping System | 287 . verify that Network is selected. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. click Modify. A (parallel movement control) displays. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. In general. and select solution 4. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. and green represents branch lines). First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. On the Generate Layout panel.

select a different layout solution. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. Either relocate the system components. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. or manually modify the pipe. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. or that offset elevations are incorrect. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. as shown. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. 29 Click Finish Layout.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. 32 If necessary.

and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m.rvt. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . 2 Zoom in.Fire Protection Piping Plan . and various manual pipe creation tools. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.33 Close the file with or without saving it. 1 In the Project Browser. and then you create piping to physically connect them.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design is highlighted. 3 If necessary. the Connect Into tool. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. and select the elbow fitting as shown. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. Next. click Training Files.

The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. 8 In the corridor. or a system component to display system tools.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. air terminals. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 5 In the drawing area. you can select the pipe or duct. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. radiators. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and pipe or duct is created. click Add To System. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. and so on) are logically connected by a system. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). mechanical equipment. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 9 On the Edit System panel. click Finish Editing System.

and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. and then tile the views. 14 Close the System Browser. verify that Network is selected. for Solution Type. 23 View the result in the 3D view. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 18 Click Finish Editing System. 20 Open Design ➤ FP . select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 21 In the Piping Plan. 13 Click Finish Layout.11 On the Generate Layout panel. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. and select solution 5. 12 On the Options Bar. verify that Solutions is selected. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler.

27 On the Options Bar. 28 In the drawing area. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then press Esc. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. select 2800.24 In the Piping Plan.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Draw Pipe. right-click. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 29 Using the same method. 25 Select the sprinkler. for Offset. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint.

Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 . for Scale.rvt. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. select 1 : 50. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Because the whole system highlights. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view.Fire Protection Piping Plan . and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. 31 In the plan view. click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. 4 On the Options Bar.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping.Design is highlighted.

8 Right-click. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and click View Properties. double-click on the section head to open the section view.6 Press Esc.

22 In the drawing area. for Sub-Discipline. 14 Select the tee fitting. 12 If necessary. 19 Make Level 2 . For Default View Template. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. and press Enter.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and then right-click the top connector. Under Identity Data. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection .Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. 15 Press Spacebar. 17 Move the cursor up. select Design. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. select MEP Section. 13 Select the elbow fitting. 10 In the Project Browser.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. right-click Design ➤ FP . 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. enter FP Section_Stair.Fire Protection Plan . For View Classification.Design the active view. and then click Modify. enter 2135. Click OK. select FP . Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . and click Apply Default View Template. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. drag the top section boundary line up. and click Draw Pipe. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . for View Name. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe.Design.

27 On the Placement Tools panel.23 In the section view. 25 Verify that Fire Protection .Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Draw Pipe. 26 On the Options Bar. and then click Modify. verify that Automatically Connect is active. 24 Select the cabinet. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. select . 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). zoom to the hose reel cabinet. for Diameter.

31 In the alert dialog. click Yes to load a family. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. 32 In the Open dialog. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . 33 In the Type Selector. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. and then click Modify. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm.rfa.29 Close the section view. and click Open. verify that M_Gate Valve .50 mm is selected. as shown.

you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally.Design ➤ 3D Views. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .rvt. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. click Training Files. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view.

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and click OK. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. width.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . or width. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. width. for Diameter. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). click Check None. 4 In the floor plan view. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. 7 On the Options Bar. select 25mm. 8 Click Modify. Changing the diameter. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. height. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. 6 In the Filter dialog. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. or height.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Clear Leader. 12 If necessary. and after each segment highlights.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). Press Esc. and click Open. 18 In the 3D view. By hiding the linked file. click to place the tag. 17 On the View Control Bar. select the linked architectural file.rfa. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . . 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category.

select 100mm. press Tab. and when the section highlights. The main piping is selected and displays in red. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. for Diameter.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. 21 On the Options Bar. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points.

as shown.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and maximize the floor plan. and then tag the piping as shown. select 40mm. 26 Using the same method. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. for Diameter. 24 In the drawing area. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 23 Close the 3D view. 25 On the Options Bar. The pipe diameter is modified.

Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. In this tutorial. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. you created a wet fire protection system. In this exercise. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. You added tags to pipes. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. For additional practice.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial.

304 .

and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. create details. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. add annotations and dimensions. 305 .Documenting a Project In this tutorial.

306 .

under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . If the view included detail graphics. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 2 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1. matchlines. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. and click Properties. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. dependent views. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. under Floor Plans. and apply a view template.Design ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. click Training Files. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. and view references. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. 3 In the Rename View dialog. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Rename. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. 307 .

click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. and click OK. and click Rename. 10 In the drawing area. and click OK. as shown. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. and then press Esc. 4 Using the same method. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 6 In the Project Browser. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. 7 Close the file without saving. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 3 In the Rename View dialog. more focused. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 9 Click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.rvt. and click Apply Default View Template. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Training Files. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. views and put them on the sheet. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. create dependent views for areas B and C. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views.

16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. For Line Pattern. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . select 11. 19 In the drawing area. In the Color dialog. select black.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. and then press Esc. and click OK. 13 Press Esc twice. For Line Weight. Click OK. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. click the current value. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 14 Click Finish Matchline. select Double Dash . Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references.

apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference.20 Select the upper view reference and. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 25 Using the same method. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. as shown. for Target view. on the Options Bar. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 21 Using the same method. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click 3D Plumbing. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter Plumbing Isometric . and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. 2 Zoom in. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. select Plumbing Isometric.rvt. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. For Default View Template. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. for View Name. 4 In the Project Browser. and zoom to each of the view references. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 29 Close the file with or without saving it.Domestic Water. click Training Files. and click Properties. 27 Using the same method. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. and select the section box.

6 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. For Pattern. select 3. Click OK. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select Documentation. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. select Dash. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. 10 Right-click. The section crop lines no longer display. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. and click to select it. for View Classification. For Sub-Discipline. Click Apply. select Plumbing.Domestic Water.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and then click OK. right-click Plumbing Isometric . 7 Select the WSHPs in the view.

12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. press Tab 3 times. and click to select it. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm. 13 Using the same method. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .

15 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. and click to select it. as shown).

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . and in the view properties. verify that Common is selected. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. specify Plumbing . click on the Format value. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. and for Default View Template. On the View Control Bar. select 1. and in the Type Selector. For Slope. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.Isometric.Sanitary Waste. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline.16 Press Esc. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . 19 Using methods learned previously.5mm Arial. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 18 Label the fixtures as shown.

as shown. and then place the callout view on a sheet. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . click Training Files. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. and click to place the spot slope annotation. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 Click OK twice. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. When the view is associated with a sheet. you use a plan view to create a callout view. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. select To the nearest 10. for Rounding. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope.rvt. Creating Callout Views In this exercise.■ In the Format dialog. 26 Press Esc twice. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m.

select 1 : 50.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). for Scale. Creating Callout Views | 317 . 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 5 On the Options Bar. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down.

using the same method. select 5. drag it to the sheet. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. double-click M601 .HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. and select the viewport. Expand the Callout Boundary category and. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. 13 In the Project Browser. Click OK. for Line Weight. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5.

17 In the Project Browser. For Default View Template. Click OK.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. enter WSHP PART PLAN. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. right-click the callout view. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. for View Name. Creating Callout Views | 319 . For Title on Sheet. and click Apply Default View Template. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down.

and click Rename. right-click the detail view. and click Apply View Template. 29 Close the file with or without saving it.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. and click OK. under Names. 25 In the Project Browser. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Creating Callout Views | 321 . and click OK. enter Typical WSHP Detail. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. 26 In the Rename View dialog.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation.

322 .

and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. as shown. Creating Annotations In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. work with model-based components.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. and annotation to create a legend. 323 . under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. linetypes. click Training Files. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. duct tags. symbols.rvt.

and select 1. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center).3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 8 With the text still selected. 9 Press Esc twice.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

and then click Right Straight. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. as shown. verify that Leader is cleared. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. select a supply diffuser.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. a return diffuser. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 16 In the drawing area. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. and a segment of rectangular duct. a segment of round duct. 15 On the Options Bar. Creating Annotations | 325 .

you can annotate the element with a second tag type. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 21 In the Load Family dialog. 24 On the Options Bar. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. for Ducts. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. clear Leader. 22 In the Tags dialog.17 Click Modify. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. click Load. and click OK. and click Open. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 25 In the drawing area. as shown. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 20 In the Tags dialog. If necessary. under Category. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.rfa.

30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Leader. 31 On the Options Bar. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. select Horizontal.26 On the Options Bar. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 32 In the drawing area. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. Creating Annotations | 327 . and then press Esc. and Attached End. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A.

then click to the right to place the leader as shown.33 On the Options Bar. 36 Press Esc twice. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . for Leader. as shown. 34 In the drawing area. select Free End.

37 In the drawing area. lay out. select the last tag placed. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. Creating Dimensions | 329 . and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. That’s because you changed a type property. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. for Leader Arrowhead. you use temporary dimensions to locate. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. and click OK. not simply an instance property. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 40 Using the method learned previously. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and all elements of that type are affected.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. and lock lighting fixtures. indicating that it’s the active view.

10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. On the Options Bar. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select the dimension line. 12 Click EQ. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 13 Press Esc. 14 Using the same method. and then select the interior face of the wall.

you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. and offset them from the wall. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and notes. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. 17 Press Esc. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. click the 3 interior locks on the line. 20 Using the same methods. and press Enter. annotation symbols. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt.9). 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. Creating a Legend In this exercise. click Training Files. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. linework. enter 2430. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. Because the dimensions are locked. Creating a Legend | 331 .

select 1 : 50. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . 10 Using the same method. click below the title to place the diffuser. Click OK.200 Neck.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. enter Diffuser Legend. select Floor Plan.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. For Scale. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. ■ 9 In the drawing area.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and select 1. 5 Click in the drawing area.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. For View. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family.

click next to the top diffuser.11 Press Esc. 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. Creating a Legend | 333 . Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. and select 1.

RISE symbol for the copy start point.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . and then press Esc. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line.DROP and its text note. 24 Select the component’s break line. 21 Press Esc. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. The selected detail lines are now thin. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE .Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 26 Press Esc.

double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 35 Change the text on the right to N. 34 Using the method learned previously.30 Select Spot Elevation . 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. enter E. Creating a Legend | 335 . and then click Modify. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. and then click Modify. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 33 Click to the left of the left break line.

40 Press Esc. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.39 With the viewport still selected. and select Title w Line .No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 337 . you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. A detail callout that references another view.rvt. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. and text. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files.113 East elevation view. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise.Detailing 15 In this lesson. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. detail groups. A drafting view using detail components.

8 Using the same method.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. place Power Riser . and then modify and align the views. 5 In the drawing area. select each of the 2 panelboards. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. and click to place it. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.113 East on the sheet. Next. 7 Drag the Power Riser . 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 4 On the Options Bar. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. clear Leader. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .

and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select the 113 North view. giving the appearance of a single view. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and click OK. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. and click Activate View. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . and click Deactivate View. 13 Right-click. right-click. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. for Title on Sheet. under Identity Data. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Select the Level 1 line. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right.9 Press Esc.

23 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. and select Title w Line . 19 Select the Level 1 line. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 22 Press Esc. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. select the 113 East elevation view. 21 Using the drag control. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click. and click Activate View. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. as shown. In the next exercise. you add wiring to the diagram. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area.

6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. expand Lines. and click OK. In the New Subcategory dialog.113 North view. for Line Weight. 9 Beginning at the transformer. 2 Close the Project Browser. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. as shown. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Chain is selected. indicating that it’s the active view. As you draw. click New. and then click OK. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. for Name. 8 On the Options Bar. In the Line Styles dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. select 6. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. Under Modify Subcategories. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. enter Electrical Power. notice that there are no snaps active. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser .

as shown. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 11 Using the same method.10 Press Esc. enter 3mm. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 13 On the Options Bar. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Offset.

15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. so that the result is as shown.

20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. as shown. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.

and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 33 On the Options Bar.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select Multiple. 31 While pressing Ctrl. and select 1. 28 Click above the cap. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 29 Click Modify. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.

346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 36 Press Esc.35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.

enter 3. click on the length dimension value. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. and press Enter. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. and press Enter.0. you can ensure that they stay together. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. You enter exact values for each line length. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 40 Press Esc. Using the same method. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . change the length of the bottom line to 3. 39 Move the cursor to the right. and then press Esc. enter 12. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 42 On the Options Bar. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. enter 7. for Offset. Press Esc.

expand Groups ➤ Detail. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. for Name.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. enter Ground. 46 In the Project Browser. 50 With the group selected. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 51 Using the method learned previously. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. and click OK. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. and then press Esc. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. TP-2B. 52 Select the detail group. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 47 In the drawing area. 54 Select the group. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select all 3 lines. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. while pressing Ctrl.

and will place it on sheet E01. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. In later exercises. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin.

and click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 In the Project Browser. click Home. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. and Left sides converge. Walkthroughs. 2 Zoom in to view the section. and then click the corner where the Top. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 6 In the Rename View dialog. 5 Right-click the copy. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and double click Typical Make Up Air. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section).rvt. select 3D Views. for Name. 8 On the ViewCube. 3 Select the section box. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Back. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and click Rename. and click Apply View Template. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and then press Esc.

16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Typical. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Click OK. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Move the cursor down and to the left. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.■ ■ Under Names. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. select 3D HVAC Iso. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 Using the same method. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. and click to specify the second leader point. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected.

and then click OK. under Extents. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. 23 Click on the crop region. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and under Extents. select Crop Region Visible.18 Press Esc. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. as shown. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. To rotate and reposition a text label. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. as shown. 19 Complete the text labels.

26 Zoom to the drawing extents.25 Click OK. Place a detail component. select Crop View and Section Box. and click Deactivate View. clear Crop Region Visible. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. and click View Properties. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . 30 On the View Control Bar. 33 Right-click the view.rvt. and click OK. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. scroll down. click Training Files. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 32 In the Instance Properties. and click Activate View. Use detail lines to create a detail group. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. and under Extents. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. 29 Right click the view. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view.

By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 9 Zoom in to the component. Click OK. click the point at the top of the drain.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. 13 In the drawing area. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 3 In the Project Browser. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. For View Classification. 12 On the Element panel. select Documentation. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. right-click the view name. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. as shown. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. For Scale. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. select Plumbing. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. for Sub-Discipline. and click Properties. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). Click OK. as the rectangle start point. select 1 : 5.

P. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. and then press Esc. for Type. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 20 Select 1. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. Drafting Detail Components | 355 .I. 22 Click Modify. 21 In the drawing area. select C.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 18 With the filled region still selected. and click OK. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. Concrete.

28 Click Modify. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. select Multiple. select the filled region. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 31 On the Options Bar. 34 Press Esc. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. and then click to select them. (Line). 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 23 In the drawing area. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines.

Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then press Esc. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. and then select the side of the slab above the line. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 40 Click Finish Region. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab.

(Rectangle). and then click to select them. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 49 Click Modify. and click OK. for Name. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 52 In the Create Group dialog.. draw wide detail lines as shown. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. press Tab to highlight the chain. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. as shown.D. enter Flashing Membrane_F. select the Flashing Membrane group. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 45 Using the method learned previously.

Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 55 Press Esc. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. as shown. as shown. press Spacebar twice. 61 Using the same method. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location.

65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. as shown. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 64 Press Esc twice. 67 On the Options Bar.62 Press Esc twice. select Leader and Free End. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

70 In the Keynotes dialog. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and then click OK. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 76 To select the leader start point. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. select 15000 (Division 15 . select the keynote and drag the text to the right. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 77 Move the cursor up and to the left.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. 81 Select the text note. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. and click to specify the text insertion point. and click to specify the second leader point. 72 If necessary. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 80 Press Esc twice. 71 Click Modify.

Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.82 Continue annotating the detail. 84 Using the following image as a guide. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. as shown.

85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. and then press Esc twice. select the view title. 88 In the drawing area. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. open P103 . 90 Press Esc.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 91 Close the file with or without saving it.

364 .